Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

98
RAJALAKSHMI ENGINEERING COLLEGE THANDALAM, CHENNAI- 602105 Department of Mechanical Engineering ME 2404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB MANUAL

Transcript of Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

Page 1: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

RAJALAKSHMI ENGINEERING COLLEGE

THANDALAM CHENNAI- 602105

Department of Mechanical Engineering

ME 2404 ndash COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND

ANALYSIS LAB MANUAL

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

2

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

A Simulation 15

Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as input to get COP using C MAT Lab

Simulation of Hydraulic Pneumatic cylinder using C MAT Lab Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using C MAT Lab

Analysis (Simple Treatment only) 30

Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole

Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported Fixed ends)

Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported Fixed ends)

Harmonic analysis of a 2D component Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component TOTAL 45

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS

(for a batch of 30 students)

Computer System 30

17rdquo VGA Color Monitor

Pentium IV Processor 40 GB HDD

256 MB RAM Color Desk Jet Printer 01

Software

ANSYS Version 7 or latest 15 licenses

C MATLAB 15 licenses

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

3

LIST OF EXERCISES

Analysis (Simple Treatment only)

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported amp Fixed ends)

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket

Ex No 4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply

Supported Fixed ends)

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Simulation

Ex No 11 Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as input to get COP using C MAT Lab

Ex No 12 Simulation of Hydraulic Pneumatic cylinder using C MAT Lab

Ex No 13 Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using C MAT Lab

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

4

INTRODUCTION What is Finite Element Analysis

Finite Element Analysis commonly called FEA is a method of numerical analysis FEA

is used for solving problems in many engineering disciplines such as machine design acoustics electromagnetism soil mechanics fluid dynamics and many others In

mathematical terms FEA is a numerical technique used for solving field problems described by a set of partial differential equations

In mechanical engineering FEA is widely used for solving structural vibration and thermal problems However FEA is not the only available tool of numerical analysis

Other numerical methods include the Finite Difference Method the Boundary Element Method and the Finite Volumes Method to mention just a few However due to its versatility and high numerical efficiency FEA has come to dominate the engineering

analysis software market while other methods have been relegated to niche applications You can use FEA to analyze any shape FEA works with different levels of geometry

idealization and provides results with the desired accuracy When implemented into modern commercial software both FEA theory and numerical problem formulation become completely transparent to users

Who should use Finite Element Analysis

As a powerful tool for engineering analysis FEA is used to solve problems ranging from very simple to very complex Design engineers use FEA during the product development

process to analyze the design- in-progress Time constraints and limited availability of product data call for many simplifications of the analysis models At the other end of

scale specialized analysts implement FEA to solve very advanced problems such as vehicle crash dynamics hydro forming or air bag deployment This book focuses on how design

engineers use FEA as a design tool Therefore we first need to explain what exactly distinguishes FEA performed by design engineers from regular FEA We will then

highlight the most essential FEA characteristics for design engineers as opposed to those for analysts

FEA for Design Engineers another design tool

For design engineers FEA is one of many design tools among CAD Prototypes spreadsheets catalogs data bases hand calculations text books etc that are all used in the design process

FEA for Design Engineers based on CAD models

Modern design is conducted using CAD tools so a CAD model is the starting point for analysis Since CAD models are used for describing geometric information for FEA it is

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

5

essential to understand how to design in CAD in order to produce reliable FEA results and how a CAD model is different from FEA model This will be discussed in later

chapters

FEA for Design Engineers concurrent with the design process

Since FEA is a design tool it should be used concurrently with the design process It should keep up with or better yet drive the design process Analysis iterations must be performed fast and since these results are used to make design decisions the results must

be reliable even when limited input is available

Limitations of FEA for Design Engineers

As you can see FEA used in the design environment must meet high requirements An

obvious question arises would it be better to have dedicated specialist perform FEA and let design engineers do what they do best - design new products The answer depends on

the size of the business type of products company organization and culture and many other tangible and intangible factors A general consensus is that design engineers should handle relatively simple types of analysis but do it quickly and of course reliably

Analyses that are very complex and time consuming cannot be executed concurrently with the design process and are usually better handled either by a dedicated analyst or

contracted out to specialized consultants Objectives of FEA for Design Engineers

The ultimate objective of using the FEA as a design tool is to change the design process

from repetitive cycles of design prototype test into streamlined process where prototypes are not used as design tools and are only needed for final design verification With the use of FEA design iterations are moved from the physical space of prototyping

and testing into the virtual space of computer simulations (figure 1-1)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

6

Figure 1-1 Traditional and FEA- driven product development

Traditional product development needs prototypes to support design in progress The

process in FEA-driven product development uses numerical models rather than physical prototypes to drive development In an FEA driven product the prototype is no longer a part of the iterative design loop

What is Solid Works Simulation

Solid Works Simulation is a commercial implementation of FEA capable of solving problems commonly found in design engineering such as the analysis of deformations

stresses natural frequencies heat flow etc Solid Works Simulation addresses the needs of design engineers It belongs to the family of engineering analysis software products

developed by the Structural Research amp Analysis Corporation (SRAC) SRAC was established in 1982 and since its inception has contributed to innovations that have had a significant impact on the evolution of FEA In 1995 SRAC partnered with the Solid

Works Corporation and created Solid Works Simulation one of the first Solid Works Gold Products which became the top-selling analysis solution for Solid Works

Corporation The commercial success of Solid Works Simulation integrated with Solid Works CAD software resulted in the acquisition of SRAC in 2001 by Dassault Systems parent of Solid Works Corporation In 2003 SRA Corporations merged with Solid Works

Corporation Solid Works Simulation is tightly integrated with Solid Works CAD software and uses Solid Works for creating and editing model geometry Solid Works is a

solid parametric feature-driven CAD system As opposed to many other CAD systems that were originally developed in a UNIX environment and only later ported to Windows Solid Works CAD was developed specifically for the Windows Operating System from

the very beginning In summary although the history of the family of Solid Works FEA

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 2: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

2

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

A Simulation 15

Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as input to get COP using C MAT Lab

Simulation of Hydraulic Pneumatic cylinder using C MAT Lab Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using C MAT Lab

Analysis (Simple Treatment only) 30

Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole

Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported Fixed ends)

Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported Fixed ends)

Harmonic analysis of a 2D component Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component TOTAL 45

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS

(for a batch of 30 students)

Computer System 30

17rdquo VGA Color Monitor

Pentium IV Processor 40 GB HDD

256 MB RAM Color Desk Jet Printer 01

Software

ANSYS Version 7 or latest 15 licenses

C MATLAB 15 licenses

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

3

LIST OF EXERCISES

Analysis (Simple Treatment only)

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported amp Fixed ends)

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket

Ex No 4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply

Supported Fixed ends)

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Simulation

Ex No 11 Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as input to get COP using C MAT Lab

Ex No 12 Simulation of Hydraulic Pneumatic cylinder using C MAT Lab

Ex No 13 Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using C MAT Lab

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

4

INTRODUCTION What is Finite Element Analysis

Finite Element Analysis commonly called FEA is a method of numerical analysis FEA

is used for solving problems in many engineering disciplines such as machine design acoustics electromagnetism soil mechanics fluid dynamics and many others In

mathematical terms FEA is a numerical technique used for solving field problems described by a set of partial differential equations

In mechanical engineering FEA is widely used for solving structural vibration and thermal problems However FEA is not the only available tool of numerical analysis

Other numerical methods include the Finite Difference Method the Boundary Element Method and the Finite Volumes Method to mention just a few However due to its versatility and high numerical efficiency FEA has come to dominate the engineering

analysis software market while other methods have been relegated to niche applications You can use FEA to analyze any shape FEA works with different levels of geometry

idealization and provides results with the desired accuracy When implemented into modern commercial software both FEA theory and numerical problem formulation become completely transparent to users

Who should use Finite Element Analysis

As a powerful tool for engineering analysis FEA is used to solve problems ranging from very simple to very complex Design engineers use FEA during the product development

process to analyze the design- in-progress Time constraints and limited availability of product data call for many simplifications of the analysis models At the other end of

scale specialized analysts implement FEA to solve very advanced problems such as vehicle crash dynamics hydro forming or air bag deployment This book focuses on how design

engineers use FEA as a design tool Therefore we first need to explain what exactly distinguishes FEA performed by design engineers from regular FEA We will then

highlight the most essential FEA characteristics for design engineers as opposed to those for analysts

FEA for Design Engineers another design tool

For design engineers FEA is one of many design tools among CAD Prototypes spreadsheets catalogs data bases hand calculations text books etc that are all used in the design process

FEA for Design Engineers based on CAD models

Modern design is conducted using CAD tools so a CAD model is the starting point for analysis Since CAD models are used for describing geometric information for FEA it is

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

5

essential to understand how to design in CAD in order to produce reliable FEA results and how a CAD model is different from FEA model This will be discussed in later

chapters

FEA for Design Engineers concurrent with the design process

Since FEA is a design tool it should be used concurrently with the design process It should keep up with or better yet drive the design process Analysis iterations must be performed fast and since these results are used to make design decisions the results must

be reliable even when limited input is available

Limitations of FEA for Design Engineers

As you can see FEA used in the design environment must meet high requirements An

obvious question arises would it be better to have dedicated specialist perform FEA and let design engineers do what they do best - design new products The answer depends on

the size of the business type of products company organization and culture and many other tangible and intangible factors A general consensus is that design engineers should handle relatively simple types of analysis but do it quickly and of course reliably

Analyses that are very complex and time consuming cannot be executed concurrently with the design process and are usually better handled either by a dedicated analyst or

contracted out to specialized consultants Objectives of FEA for Design Engineers

The ultimate objective of using the FEA as a design tool is to change the design process

from repetitive cycles of design prototype test into streamlined process where prototypes are not used as design tools and are only needed for final design verification With the use of FEA design iterations are moved from the physical space of prototyping

and testing into the virtual space of computer simulations (figure 1-1)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

6

Figure 1-1 Traditional and FEA- driven product development

Traditional product development needs prototypes to support design in progress The

process in FEA-driven product development uses numerical models rather than physical prototypes to drive development In an FEA driven product the prototype is no longer a part of the iterative design loop

What is Solid Works Simulation

Solid Works Simulation is a commercial implementation of FEA capable of solving problems commonly found in design engineering such as the analysis of deformations

stresses natural frequencies heat flow etc Solid Works Simulation addresses the needs of design engineers It belongs to the family of engineering analysis software products

developed by the Structural Research amp Analysis Corporation (SRAC) SRAC was established in 1982 and since its inception has contributed to innovations that have had a significant impact on the evolution of FEA In 1995 SRAC partnered with the Solid

Works Corporation and created Solid Works Simulation one of the first Solid Works Gold Products which became the top-selling analysis solution for Solid Works

Corporation The commercial success of Solid Works Simulation integrated with Solid Works CAD software resulted in the acquisition of SRAC in 2001 by Dassault Systems parent of Solid Works Corporation In 2003 SRA Corporations merged with Solid Works

Corporation Solid Works Simulation is tightly integrated with Solid Works CAD software and uses Solid Works for creating and editing model geometry Solid Works is a

solid parametric feature-driven CAD system As opposed to many other CAD systems that were originally developed in a UNIX environment and only later ported to Windows Solid Works CAD was developed specifically for the Windows Operating System from

the very beginning In summary although the history of the family of Solid Works FEA

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 3: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

3

LIST OF EXERCISES

Analysis (Simple Treatment only)

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply supported amp Fixed ends)

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket

Ex No 4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply

Supported Fixed ends)

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

Simulation

Ex No 11 Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as input to get COP using C MAT Lab

Ex No 12 Simulation of Hydraulic Pneumatic cylinder using C MAT Lab

Ex No 13 Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using C MAT Lab

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

4

INTRODUCTION What is Finite Element Analysis

Finite Element Analysis commonly called FEA is a method of numerical analysis FEA

is used for solving problems in many engineering disciplines such as machine design acoustics electromagnetism soil mechanics fluid dynamics and many others In

mathematical terms FEA is a numerical technique used for solving field problems described by a set of partial differential equations

In mechanical engineering FEA is widely used for solving structural vibration and thermal problems However FEA is not the only available tool of numerical analysis

Other numerical methods include the Finite Difference Method the Boundary Element Method and the Finite Volumes Method to mention just a few However due to its versatility and high numerical efficiency FEA has come to dominate the engineering

analysis software market while other methods have been relegated to niche applications You can use FEA to analyze any shape FEA works with different levels of geometry

idealization and provides results with the desired accuracy When implemented into modern commercial software both FEA theory and numerical problem formulation become completely transparent to users

Who should use Finite Element Analysis

As a powerful tool for engineering analysis FEA is used to solve problems ranging from very simple to very complex Design engineers use FEA during the product development

process to analyze the design- in-progress Time constraints and limited availability of product data call for many simplifications of the analysis models At the other end of

scale specialized analysts implement FEA to solve very advanced problems such as vehicle crash dynamics hydro forming or air bag deployment This book focuses on how design

engineers use FEA as a design tool Therefore we first need to explain what exactly distinguishes FEA performed by design engineers from regular FEA We will then

highlight the most essential FEA characteristics for design engineers as opposed to those for analysts

FEA for Design Engineers another design tool

For design engineers FEA is one of many design tools among CAD Prototypes spreadsheets catalogs data bases hand calculations text books etc that are all used in the design process

FEA for Design Engineers based on CAD models

Modern design is conducted using CAD tools so a CAD model is the starting point for analysis Since CAD models are used for describing geometric information for FEA it is

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

5

essential to understand how to design in CAD in order to produce reliable FEA results and how a CAD model is different from FEA model This will be discussed in later

chapters

FEA for Design Engineers concurrent with the design process

Since FEA is a design tool it should be used concurrently with the design process It should keep up with or better yet drive the design process Analysis iterations must be performed fast and since these results are used to make design decisions the results must

be reliable even when limited input is available

Limitations of FEA for Design Engineers

As you can see FEA used in the design environment must meet high requirements An

obvious question arises would it be better to have dedicated specialist perform FEA and let design engineers do what they do best - design new products The answer depends on

the size of the business type of products company organization and culture and many other tangible and intangible factors A general consensus is that design engineers should handle relatively simple types of analysis but do it quickly and of course reliably

Analyses that are very complex and time consuming cannot be executed concurrently with the design process and are usually better handled either by a dedicated analyst or

contracted out to specialized consultants Objectives of FEA for Design Engineers

The ultimate objective of using the FEA as a design tool is to change the design process

from repetitive cycles of design prototype test into streamlined process where prototypes are not used as design tools and are only needed for final design verification With the use of FEA design iterations are moved from the physical space of prototyping

and testing into the virtual space of computer simulations (figure 1-1)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

6

Figure 1-1 Traditional and FEA- driven product development

Traditional product development needs prototypes to support design in progress The

process in FEA-driven product development uses numerical models rather than physical prototypes to drive development In an FEA driven product the prototype is no longer a part of the iterative design loop

What is Solid Works Simulation

Solid Works Simulation is a commercial implementation of FEA capable of solving problems commonly found in design engineering such as the analysis of deformations

stresses natural frequencies heat flow etc Solid Works Simulation addresses the needs of design engineers It belongs to the family of engineering analysis software products

developed by the Structural Research amp Analysis Corporation (SRAC) SRAC was established in 1982 and since its inception has contributed to innovations that have had a significant impact on the evolution of FEA In 1995 SRAC partnered with the Solid

Works Corporation and created Solid Works Simulation one of the first Solid Works Gold Products which became the top-selling analysis solution for Solid Works

Corporation The commercial success of Solid Works Simulation integrated with Solid Works CAD software resulted in the acquisition of SRAC in 2001 by Dassault Systems parent of Solid Works Corporation In 2003 SRA Corporations merged with Solid Works

Corporation Solid Works Simulation is tightly integrated with Solid Works CAD software and uses Solid Works for creating and editing model geometry Solid Works is a

solid parametric feature-driven CAD system As opposed to many other CAD systems that were originally developed in a UNIX environment and only later ported to Windows Solid Works CAD was developed specifically for the Windows Operating System from

the very beginning In summary although the history of the family of Solid Works FEA

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 4: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

4

INTRODUCTION What is Finite Element Analysis

Finite Element Analysis commonly called FEA is a method of numerical analysis FEA

is used for solving problems in many engineering disciplines such as machine design acoustics electromagnetism soil mechanics fluid dynamics and many others In

mathematical terms FEA is a numerical technique used for solving field problems described by a set of partial differential equations

In mechanical engineering FEA is widely used for solving structural vibration and thermal problems However FEA is not the only available tool of numerical analysis

Other numerical methods include the Finite Difference Method the Boundary Element Method and the Finite Volumes Method to mention just a few However due to its versatility and high numerical efficiency FEA has come to dominate the engineering

analysis software market while other methods have been relegated to niche applications You can use FEA to analyze any shape FEA works with different levels of geometry

idealization and provides results with the desired accuracy When implemented into modern commercial software both FEA theory and numerical problem formulation become completely transparent to users

Who should use Finite Element Analysis

As a powerful tool for engineering analysis FEA is used to solve problems ranging from very simple to very complex Design engineers use FEA during the product development

process to analyze the design- in-progress Time constraints and limited availability of product data call for many simplifications of the analysis models At the other end of

scale specialized analysts implement FEA to solve very advanced problems such as vehicle crash dynamics hydro forming or air bag deployment This book focuses on how design

engineers use FEA as a design tool Therefore we first need to explain what exactly distinguishes FEA performed by design engineers from regular FEA We will then

highlight the most essential FEA characteristics for design engineers as opposed to those for analysts

FEA for Design Engineers another design tool

For design engineers FEA is one of many design tools among CAD Prototypes spreadsheets catalogs data bases hand calculations text books etc that are all used in the design process

FEA for Design Engineers based on CAD models

Modern design is conducted using CAD tools so a CAD model is the starting point for analysis Since CAD models are used for describing geometric information for FEA it is

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

5

essential to understand how to design in CAD in order to produce reliable FEA results and how a CAD model is different from FEA model This will be discussed in later

chapters

FEA for Design Engineers concurrent with the design process

Since FEA is a design tool it should be used concurrently with the design process It should keep up with or better yet drive the design process Analysis iterations must be performed fast and since these results are used to make design decisions the results must

be reliable even when limited input is available

Limitations of FEA for Design Engineers

As you can see FEA used in the design environment must meet high requirements An

obvious question arises would it be better to have dedicated specialist perform FEA and let design engineers do what they do best - design new products The answer depends on

the size of the business type of products company organization and culture and many other tangible and intangible factors A general consensus is that design engineers should handle relatively simple types of analysis but do it quickly and of course reliably

Analyses that are very complex and time consuming cannot be executed concurrently with the design process and are usually better handled either by a dedicated analyst or

contracted out to specialized consultants Objectives of FEA for Design Engineers

The ultimate objective of using the FEA as a design tool is to change the design process

from repetitive cycles of design prototype test into streamlined process where prototypes are not used as design tools and are only needed for final design verification With the use of FEA design iterations are moved from the physical space of prototyping

and testing into the virtual space of computer simulations (figure 1-1)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

6

Figure 1-1 Traditional and FEA- driven product development

Traditional product development needs prototypes to support design in progress The

process in FEA-driven product development uses numerical models rather than physical prototypes to drive development In an FEA driven product the prototype is no longer a part of the iterative design loop

What is Solid Works Simulation

Solid Works Simulation is a commercial implementation of FEA capable of solving problems commonly found in design engineering such as the analysis of deformations

stresses natural frequencies heat flow etc Solid Works Simulation addresses the needs of design engineers It belongs to the family of engineering analysis software products

developed by the Structural Research amp Analysis Corporation (SRAC) SRAC was established in 1982 and since its inception has contributed to innovations that have had a significant impact on the evolution of FEA In 1995 SRAC partnered with the Solid

Works Corporation and created Solid Works Simulation one of the first Solid Works Gold Products which became the top-selling analysis solution for Solid Works

Corporation The commercial success of Solid Works Simulation integrated with Solid Works CAD software resulted in the acquisition of SRAC in 2001 by Dassault Systems parent of Solid Works Corporation In 2003 SRA Corporations merged with Solid Works

Corporation Solid Works Simulation is tightly integrated with Solid Works CAD software and uses Solid Works for creating and editing model geometry Solid Works is a

solid parametric feature-driven CAD system As opposed to many other CAD systems that were originally developed in a UNIX environment and only later ported to Windows Solid Works CAD was developed specifically for the Windows Operating System from

the very beginning In summary although the history of the family of Solid Works FEA

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 5: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

5

essential to understand how to design in CAD in order to produce reliable FEA results and how a CAD model is different from FEA model This will be discussed in later

chapters

FEA for Design Engineers concurrent with the design process

Since FEA is a design tool it should be used concurrently with the design process It should keep up with or better yet drive the design process Analysis iterations must be performed fast and since these results are used to make design decisions the results must

be reliable even when limited input is available

Limitations of FEA for Design Engineers

As you can see FEA used in the design environment must meet high requirements An

obvious question arises would it be better to have dedicated specialist perform FEA and let design engineers do what they do best - design new products The answer depends on

the size of the business type of products company organization and culture and many other tangible and intangible factors A general consensus is that design engineers should handle relatively simple types of analysis but do it quickly and of course reliably

Analyses that are very complex and time consuming cannot be executed concurrently with the design process and are usually better handled either by a dedicated analyst or

contracted out to specialized consultants Objectives of FEA for Design Engineers

The ultimate objective of using the FEA as a design tool is to change the design process

from repetitive cycles of design prototype test into streamlined process where prototypes are not used as design tools and are only needed for final design verification With the use of FEA design iterations are moved from the physical space of prototyping

and testing into the virtual space of computer simulations (figure 1-1)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

6

Figure 1-1 Traditional and FEA- driven product development

Traditional product development needs prototypes to support design in progress The

process in FEA-driven product development uses numerical models rather than physical prototypes to drive development In an FEA driven product the prototype is no longer a part of the iterative design loop

What is Solid Works Simulation

Solid Works Simulation is a commercial implementation of FEA capable of solving problems commonly found in design engineering such as the analysis of deformations

stresses natural frequencies heat flow etc Solid Works Simulation addresses the needs of design engineers It belongs to the family of engineering analysis software products

developed by the Structural Research amp Analysis Corporation (SRAC) SRAC was established in 1982 and since its inception has contributed to innovations that have had a significant impact on the evolution of FEA In 1995 SRAC partnered with the Solid

Works Corporation and created Solid Works Simulation one of the first Solid Works Gold Products which became the top-selling analysis solution for Solid Works

Corporation The commercial success of Solid Works Simulation integrated with Solid Works CAD software resulted in the acquisition of SRAC in 2001 by Dassault Systems parent of Solid Works Corporation In 2003 SRA Corporations merged with Solid Works

Corporation Solid Works Simulation is tightly integrated with Solid Works CAD software and uses Solid Works for creating and editing model geometry Solid Works is a

solid parametric feature-driven CAD system As opposed to many other CAD systems that were originally developed in a UNIX environment and only later ported to Windows Solid Works CAD was developed specifically for the Windows Operating System from

the very beginning In summary although the history of the family of Solid Works FEA

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 6: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

6

Figure 1-1 Traditional and FEA- driven product development

Traditional product development needs prototypes to support design in progress The

process in FEA-driven product development uses numerical models rather than physical prototypes to drive development In an FEA driven product the prototype is no longer a part of the iterative design loop

What is Solid Works Simulation

Solid Works Simulation is a commercial implementation of FEA capable of solving problems commonly found in design engineering such as the analysis of deformations

stresses natural frequencies heat flow etc Solid Works Simulation addresses the needs of design engineers It belongs to the family of engineering analysis software products

developed by the Structural Research amp Analysis Corporation (SRAC) SRAC was established in 1982 and since its inception has contributed to innovations that have had a significant impact on the evolution of FEA In 1995 SRAC partnered with the Solid

Works Corporation and created Solid Works Simulation one of the first Solid Works Gold Products which became the top-selling analysis solution for Solid Works

Corporation The commercial success of Solid Works Simulation integrated with Solid Works CAD software resulted in the acquisition of SRAC in 2001 by Dassault Systems parent of Solid Works Corporation In 2003 SRA Corporations merged with Solid Works

Corporation Solid Works Simulation is tightly integrated with Solid Works CAD software and uses Solid Works for creating and editing model geometry Solid Works is a

solid parametric feature-driven CAD system As opposed to many other CAD systems that were originally developed in a UNIX environment and only later ported to Windows Solid Works CAD was developed specifically for the Windows Operating System from

the very beginning In summary although the history of the family of Solid Works FEA

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 7: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

7

products dates back to 1982 Solid Works Simulation has been specifically developed for Windows and takes full advantage this of deep integration between Solid Works and

Windows representing the state-of-the-art in the engineering analysis software

Fundamental steps in an FEA project The starting point for any Solid Works Simulation project is a Solid Works model which can be one part or an assembly At this stage material properties loads and restraints are

defined Next as is always the case with using any FEA based analysis tool we split the geometry into relatively small and simply shaped entities called finite elements The

elements are called finite to emphasize the fact that they are not infinitesimally small but only reasonably small in comparison to the overall model size Creating finite elements is commonly called meshing When working with finite elements the Solid

Works Simulation solver approximates the solution being sought (for example deformations or stresses) by assembling the solutions for individual elements

From the perspective of FEA software each application of FEA requires three steps

Preprocessing of the FEA model which involves defining the model and then splitting it into finite elements

Solution for computing wanted results

Post-processing for results analysis

We will follow the above three steps every time we use Solid Works Simulation

From the perspective of FEA methodology we can list the following FEA steps Building the mathematical model

Building the finite element model

Solving the finite element model

Analyzing the results

The following subsections discuss these four steps

Building the mathematical model

The starting point to analysis with Solid Works Simulation is a Solid Works model Geometry of the model needs to be meshable into a correct and reasonably small element

mesh This requirement of meshability has very important implications We need to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 8: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

8

ensure that the CAD geometry will indeed mesh and that the produced mesh will provide the correct solution of the data of interest such as displacements stresses temperature

distribution etc This necessity often requires modifications to the CAD geometry which can take the form of

defeaturing idealization andor clean-up described below

It is important to mention that we do not always simplify the CAD model with the sole objective of making it meshable Often we must simplify a model even though it would

mesh correctly as is but the resulting mesh would be too large and consequently the analysis would take too much time Geometry modifications allow for a simpler mesh

and shorter computing times Also geometry preparation may not be required at all successful meshing depends as much on the quality of geometry submitted for meshing as it does on the

sophistication of the meshing tools implemented in the FEA software

Having prepared a meshable but not yet meshed geometry we now define material properties (these can also be imported from a Solid Works model) loads and restraints and provide information on the type of analysis that we wish to perform This procedure

completes the creation of the mathematical model (figure 1-2) Notice that the process of creating the mathematical model is not FEA-specific FEA has not yet entered the

picture

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 9: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

9

Figure 1-2 Building the mathematical model

The process of creating a mathematical model consists of the modification o CAD geometry (here removing external fillets) definition of loads restraint material properties and definition of the type of analysis (eg static) that we wish to perform

Building the finite element model

The mathematical model now needs to be split into finite elements through a process of discretization more commonly known as meshing (figure 1-3)Loads and restraints are

also discretized and once the model has been meshed the discretized loads and restraints are applied to the nodes of the finite element mesh

Figure 1-3 Building the finite element model

The mathematical model is discretized into a finite element model This completes the pre-processing phase The FEA model is then solved with one of the numerical solvers

available in Solid Works Simulation Solving the finite element model

Having created the finite element model we now use a solver provided in Solid Works

Simulation to produce the desired data of interest (figure 1-3)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 10: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

10

Analyzing the results

Often the most difficult step of FEA is analyzing the results Proper interpretation of results requires that we understand all simplifications (and errors they introduce) in the

first three steps defining the mathematical model meshing its geometry and solving

Errors in FEA

The process illustrated in figures 1-2 and 1-3 introduces unavoidable errors Formulation of a mathematical model introduces modeling errors (also called idealization errors)

discretization of the mathematical model introduces discretization errors and solving introduces numerical errors Of these three types of errors only discretization errors are specific to FEA Modeling errors affecting the mathematical model are introduced before

FEA is utilized and can only be controlled by using correct modeling techniques Solution errors caused by the accumulation of round-off errors are difficult to control but

are usually very low

A closer look at finite elements

Meshing splits continuous mathematical models into finite elements The type of

elements created by this process depends on the type of geometry meshed the type of analysis and sometimes on our own preferences Solid Works Simulation offers two types of elements tetrahedral solid elements (for meshing solid geometry) and shell elements

(for meshing surface geometry)Before proceeding we need to clarify an important terminology issue In CAD terminology solid denotes the type of geometry solid

geometry (as opposed to surface or wire frame geometry) in FEA terminology it denotes the type of element

Solid elements

The type of geometry that is most often used for analysis with Solid Works Simulation is solid CAD geometry Meshing of this geometry is accomplished with tetrahedral solid

elements commonly called tets in FEA jargon The tetrahedral solid elements in Solid Works Simulation can either be first order elements (draft quality) or second order

elements (high quality) The user decides whether to use draft quality or high quality elements for meshing However as we will soon prove only high quality elements should be used for an analysis of any importance The difference between first and

second order tetrahedral elements is illustrated in figure 1-4

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 11: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

11

Figure 1 -4 Differences between first and second order tetrahedral elements

First and the second order tetrahedral elements are shown before and after deformation Note that the deformed faces of the second order element may assume curvilinear shape

while deformed faces of the first order element must remain fiat First order tetrahedral elements have four nodes straight edges and flat faces These

edges and faces remain straight and flat after the element has experienced deformation under the applied load First order tetrahedral elements model the linear field of

displacement inside their volume on faces and along edges The linear (or first order) displacement field gives these elements their name first order elements If you recall from the Mechanics of Materials strain is the first derivative of displacement Therefore

strain and consequently stress are both constant in first order tetrahedral elements This situation imposes a very severe limitation on the capability of a mesh constructed with

first order elements to model stress distribution of any real complexity To make matters worse straight edges and flat faces cannot map properly to curvilinear geometry as illustrated in figure 1-5

Figure 1-5 Failure of straight edges and flat faces to map to curvilinear geometry

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 12: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

12

A detail of a mesh created with first order tetrahedral elements Notice the imprecise element mapping to the hole flat faces approximate the face of the cylindrical hole

Second order tetrahedral elements have ten nodes and model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and first order (linear) stress field in their volume along laces and

edges The edges and faces of second order tetrahedral elements before and after deformation can be curvilinear Therefore these elements can map precisely to curved surfaces as illustrated

in figure 1-6 Even though these elements are more computationally demanding than first order elements second order tetrahedral elements are used for the vast majority of

analyses with Solid Works Simulation

Figure 1-6 Mapping curved surfaces

A detail is shown of a mesh created with second order tetrahedral elements Second order elements map well to curvilinear geometry

Shell elements Besides solid elements Solid Works Simulation also offers shell elements While solid

elements are created by meshing solid geometry shell elements are created by meshing surfaces Shell elements are primarily used for analyzing thin-walled structures Since

surface geometry does not carry information about thickness the user must provide this information Similar to solid elements shell elements also come in draft and high quality with analogous consequences with respect to their ability to map to curvilinear geometry

as shown in figure 1-7 and figure 1-8 As demonstrated with solid elements first order shell elements model the linear displacement field with constant strain and stress while

second order shell elements model the second order (parabolic) displacement field and the first order strain and stress field

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 13: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

13

Figure 1-7 First order shell element

This shell element mesh was created with first order elements Notice the imprecise mapping of the mesh to curvilinear geometry

Figure 1-8 Second order shell element

Shell element mesh created with second order elements which map correctly to curvilinear geometry

Certain classes of shapes can be modeled using either solid or shell elements such as the plate shown in figure 1-9 The type of elements used depends then on the objective of the

analysis Often the nature of the geometry dictates what type of element should be used for meshing For example parts produced by casting are meshed with solid elements

while a sheet metal structure is best meshed with shell elements

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 14: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

14

Figure 1-9 Plate modeled with solid elements (left) and shell elements

The plate shown can be modeled with either solid elements (left) or shell elements (right) The actual choice depends on the particular requirements of analysis and sometimes on

personal preferences

Figure 1-10 below presents the basic library of elements in Solid Works Simulation Elements like a hexahedral solid quadrilateral shell or other shapes are not availab le in

Solid Works Simulation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 15: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

15

Figure 1-10 Solid Works Simulation element library

Four element types are available in the Solid Works Simulation element library The vast majority of analyses use the second order tetrahedral element Both solid and she ll first

order elements should be avoided

The degrees of freedom (DOF) of a node in a finite element mesh define the ability of the node to perform translation or rotation The number of degrees of freedom that a node possesses depends on the type of element that the node belongs to In Solid Works

Simulation nodes of solid elements have three degrees of freedom while nodes of shell elements have six degrees of freedom This means that in order to describe

transformation of a solid element from the components of nodal displacement most often the x y z displacements In the case of shell elements we need to know not only the translational components of nodal displacements but also the rotational displacement

components

What is calculated in FEA Each degree of freedom of every node in a finite element mesh constitutes an unknown In structural analysis where we look at deformations and stresses nodal displacements are the primary unknowns If solid elements are used there are three displacement

components (or 3 degrees of freedom) per node that must be calculated With shell elements six displacement components (or6 degrees of freedom) must be calculated

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 16: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

16

Everything else such as strains and stresses are calculated based on the nodal displacements Consequently rigid restraints applied to solid elements require only three

degrees of freedom to be constrained Rigid restraints applied to shell elements require that all six degrees of freedom be constrained In a thermal analysis which finds

temperatures and heat flow the primary unknowns are nodal temperatures Since temperature is a scalar value (unlike the vector nature of displacements) then regardless of what type of element is used there is only one unknown (temperature) to be found for

each node All other results available in the thermal analysis are calculated based on temperature results The fact that there is only one unknown to be found for each node

rather than three or six makes thermal analysis less computationally intensive than structural analysis

How to interpret FEA results Results of structural FEA are provided in the form of displacements and stresses But how do we decide if a design passes or fails and what does it take for alarms to go

off What exactly constitutes a failure To answer these questions we need to establish some criteria to interpret FEA results

which may include maximum acceptable deformation maximum stress or lowest acceptable natural frequency

While displacement and frequency criteria are quite obvious and easy to establish stress criteria are not Lets assume that we need to conduct a stress analysis in order to ensure

that stresses are within an acceptable range To judge stress results we need to understand the mechanism of potential failure if a part breaks what stress measure best describes that failure Is it vonMises stress maximum principal stress shear stress or

something else COSMOS Works can present stress results in any form we want It is up to us to decide which stress measure to use for issuing a pass or fail verdict

Any textbook on the Mechanics of Materials provides information on various failure criteria Interested readers can also refer to books Here we will limit our discussion to

outlining the differences between two commonly used stress measures Von Mises stress and the principal stress

Von Mises stress

Von Mises stress also known as Huber stress is a stress measure that accounts for all six stress components of a general 3-D state of stress (figure 1-11)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 17: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

17

Figure 1-11 General state of stress represented by three normal stresses σx σy σz and

six shear stresses τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz Two components of shear stress and one component of normal stress act on each side of an elementary cube Due to equilibrium requirements the general 3-Dstate of stress is

characterized by six stress components σx σy σz and τxy = τyx τyz = τzy τzx = τxz

Note that von Mises stress is a non-negative scalar value Von Mises stress is commonly

used to present results because structural safety for many engineering materials showing elasto-plastic properties (for example steel) can be evaluated using von Mises stress The

magnitude of von Mises stress can be compared to material yield or to ultimate strength to calculate the yield strength or the ultimate strength safety factor

Principal stresses

By properly adjusting the angular orientation of the stress cube in figure 1-11 shear stresses disappear and the state of stress is represented only by three principal stresses o o2 and 03 as shown in figure 1-12 In Solid Works simulation principal stresses are

denoted as σ1 σ2 and σ3

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 18: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

18

Figure 1-12 General state of stress represented by three principal stresses σ1 σ2 σ3

Units of measurements

Internally Solid Works simulation uses the International System of Units (SI)However for the users convenience the unit manager allows data entry in three different systems of units SI Metric and English Results can be displayed using any of the three unit

systems Figure 1-13 summarizes the available systems of units

Figure 1-13 Unit systems available in Solid Works simulation

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific gravity The distinction between these

two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are

expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 19: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

19

However we may be asked to prepare data or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make

some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use any consistent system of units for FEA models

but in practice the choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD

models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density and they can lead to very serious errors

SI Metric and English systems of units can be interchanged when entering data or analyzing results in Solid Works simulation

Experience indicates that units of mass density are often confused with units of specific

gravity The distinction between these two is quite clear in SI units Mass density is expressed in [kgm3] while specific gravity in [Nm3]However in the English system both specific mass and specific gravity are expressed in [lbin3] where [lb] denotes

either pound mass or pound force As Solid Works simulation users we are spared much confusion and trouble with systems of units However we may be asked to prepare data

or interpret the results of other FEA software where we do not have the convenience of the unit manager Therefore we will make some general comments about the use of different systems of units in the preparation of input data for FEA models We can use

any consistent system of units for FEA models but in practice his choice of the system of units is dictated by what units are used in the CAD model The system of units in CAD

models is not always consistent length can be expressed in [mm] while mass density can be expressed in [kgm3]Contrary to CAD models in FEA all units must be consistent Inconsistencies are easy to overlook especially when defining mass and mass density

and they can lead to very serious errors

In the SI system which is based on meters [m] for length kilograms [kg] for mass and seconds [s] for time all other units are easily derived from these basic units In mechanical engineering length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm] force in

Newton [N] and time in seconds [s] All other units must then be derived from these basic units [mm] [N] and [s]Consequently the unit of mass is defined as a mass

which when subjected to a unit force equal to IN will accelerate with a unit acceleration of 1 mms2Therefore the unit of mass in a system using [mm] for length and [N] for force is equivalent to 1000 kg or one metric ton Consequently mass density is

expressed in metric tonne [tonnemm3] This is critically important to remember when defining material properties in FEA software without a unit manager Notice in figure 1-

14 that an erroneous definition of mass density in [kgm3] rather than in [tonnemm3] results in mass density being one trillion (1012) times higher (figure 1-14)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 20: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

20

Figure 1-14 Mass densities of aluminum in the three systems of units

Comparison of numerical values of mass densities of aluminum defined in this system of

units with the system of units derived from SI and with the English (IPS) system of units

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 21: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

21

Ex No 1 Stress analysis of beams (Simply supported Cantilever amp Fixed ends)

AIM To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given beams

(Simply supported Cantileveramp Fixed ends) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem Description

(i) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam

with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (11) below The cross-section of the beam is 132mm x 264mm while the modulus of

elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the beam

(ii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (12) below The

cross-section of the beam is 150mm x 300mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Fig11

Fig12

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 22: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

22

(iii) A distributed load amp Point load will be applied to a solid steel beam with a rectangular cross section as shown in the figure (13) below The

cross-section of the beam is 572mm x 1144mm while the modulus of elasticity of the steel is 210GPa Find reaction deflection and stresses in the

beam

Problem (I)

Creation of solid model

Solid part 1

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the right plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as

132 X 264 mm

Feature Module Select the sketch1 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with a length

3000mm rarr ok

Solid part 2

Sketch module

Select the right end face rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify the dimensions as 132 X 264 mm

Feature Module

Select the sketch2 rarr select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 3000mm rarr unselect merge component rarr ok

Fig13

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 23: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

23

The model must be a solid object

Reference point

Sketch rarr point rarr Select the top surface rarr select normal view rarr

locate a point rarrselect smart dimensions modify the location of the point as 2000 mm from right end rarr ok

Select reference point rarr select sketch3 (point) amp top surface rarr ok

Analysis the solid model

Step by step procedure for the analysis

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 24: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

24

Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Right click on the Static study - Treat the solid part 1 amp 2 as a beam separately

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the solid

part folder in the simulation studyrarr select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From

library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 25: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

25

Calculate the Joints

To calculate the jointrarr Right-click the joints folder in Static study

rarr edit rarr calculate rarr ok (after finding display of no of joints model)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 26: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

26

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixture(1) at end Ararr Right-click the Fixture folder in

Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the left

end joint where Fixture is to be applied rarr Select immovable geometry rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 27: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

27

To define the Fixture (2) at end B rarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr Select the

right end jointrarr Select reference geometry as fixture type rarr Select the top surface as reference plane to represent the direction of the

force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane rarr Enter valve 0 rarr In the graphic window note the

symbols of the applied Fixture Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu This action opens the Force window The Force window displays the portion where point load amp uniformly distributed load is applied

UDL

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

solid part1 rarr select load m rarr select the top surface as reference

plane to represent the direction of the force This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and loadrarr select the force

direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load the beam with 20000 Nm of uniformly distributed load

over the selected face rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 28: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

28

Point Load

Right click the load folder rarr Select forces rarr select the

reference point rarr select the top surface as reference plane to

represent the direction of the force rarr select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference button in order to load

the beam with 20000 N of point load on the selected point rarr ok

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 29: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

29

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicks the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully

Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Select one of the following analyses you want to see

Stress distribution Displacement distribution

Deformed shape

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 30: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

30

Make sure that the above plots are defined in your configuration if not define them Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the

Results folder You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Problem (ii) amp (iii)

Follow the same procedure with required changes

Result The analysis of the beam was carried out using the solidworks

simulation and the software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical results

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 31: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

31

Ex No 2 Stress analysis of a Rectangular plate with circular holes Aim

To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

plate with holes using solid works simulation and analytical expressions Problem description

A steel plate with 3 holes 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm respectively is supported and loaded as shown in figure We assume that the support is

rigid (this is also called built-in support or fixed support) and that the 20 KN tensile load is uniformly distributed on the end face opposite to the

supported face The cross section is 15 mm x 25 mm length is 100mm Material (Alloy steel)

Creation of the solid model using solid works

Sketch module

Sketch(1) gt Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr draw rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensions modify

the dimensions as 15 X 25 mmrarr Draw three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance

T = 15mm

L = 100mm

H = 25mm

D=3mm D=5mm D=10mm P = 20kN

Uniformly distributed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 32: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

32

Feature Module

Feature (1) gt Select the sketch () rarr Select extruded boss rarr extrude with thickness 100mm Sketch module

Sketch (2) rarr select the front surface rarrselect normal view rarr Draw

three circles as 3mm 5mm amp 10 mm with 25mm distance Feature Module

Feature (2) gt Select the sketch (2) rarr select extruded cut rarr extrude

with thickness 15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lens list To start

Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulat ion shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager

tab New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the

Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the

Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up

menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the Select material source areararr Select Alloy Steel

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 33: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

33

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study rarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the left end face rarr ok

Apply loads

We now define the load by selecting Force from the pop-up menu

The Force window displays the selected face where tensile force is applied rarrSelect use reference geometry rarr Select the right plane as reference plane

to represent the direction of the force rarr Select the force direction which is normal to the selected reference plane button in order to load the Model with

20000 N of tensile force uniformly distributed over the end face Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution A successful or failed solution is reported and must be acknowledged before

proceeding to analysis of results When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in

Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder

with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results

Stress1 showing in normal x direction

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the rectangular plate was carried out using the solid works simulation and software results were compared with theoretical or

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 34: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

34

Ex No 3 Stress analysis of a Rectangular L Bracket

Aim To perform displacement and stress analysis for the given rectangular

L Bracket (Wall Bracket) using solid works simulation and analytical expressions

Problem description

An L-shaped bracket is supported and loaded as shown in figure 3-1

We wish to find the Displacements and stresses caused by a 5000 N which is 60deg inclined In particular we are interested in stresses in the corner where

the 5 mm round edge (fillet) is located Material Grey Cast Iron

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the front plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the required shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions rarrselect fillet mode rarrenter radius 5mmrarrselect the specified edgesrarrok

5000N

60ordm

300mm

150mm

70mm

Ф 90mm

Ф 70mm

Thickness 35mm

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 35: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

35

Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select extruded boss rarr select midplane option rarr

extrude with thickness 175mm Sketch Point

Select the front plane rarr normal view rarr draw a line (sketch 2)

from the centre of the hole which is 60ordm inclined to the vertical

Select the front plane rarr locate the intersection point of 60ordm

inclined line amp sketch 3 rarrok Reference point

Select reference point geometry rarr select sketch 3 point amp inner

surface of the hole rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

Verify that simulation mode is selected in the Add-lns list To start Simulation Once Solid Works Simulation has been added Simulation

shows in the main Solid Works tool menu Select the simulation Manager tab

New Study

To define a new study select New Study either from the Simulation menu or the Simulation Command Manager gt When a study is

defined Solid Works Simulation creates a study window located below the Solid Works Feature Manager window and places several folders in it It

also adds a study tab that provides access to the window Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study

Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

To apply material to the Simulation model right-click the part

folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material from the pop-up menu rarr This action opens the Material rarr Select From library files in the

Select material source areararr Select Grey Cast Iron

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 36: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

36

Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select fixed geometry as Fixture type rarr select the model face (left end face) where Fixture is to be appliedrarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select force rarr Select the reference point rarr select the reference plane to represent the direction of the force in

order to load the Model with 5000 N of which is 60ordm inclined This illustration also shows symbols of applied restraint and load

Create the mesh

We are now ready to mesh the model rarr Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh

Run the analysis

Right-clicking the simulation mode rarr Select Run to start the solution

When the solution completes successfully Simulation creates a Results folder with result plots which are defined in Simulation Default Options

Results

With the solution completed simulation automatically creates Results folder with several new folders in the study Manager Window like Stress

Displacement and Strain amp Deformation Each folder holds an automatically created plot with its respective type of results The solution

can be executed with different properties

Stress1 showing von Misses stresses

Displacement1 showing resultant displacements

Once the solution completes you can add more plots to the Results folder

You can also create subfolders in the Results folder to group plots To display stress results double-click on the Stress1 icon in the

Results folder or right-click it and select Show from the pop-up menu

Result

The analysis of the L - Bracket was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared with

analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 37: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

37

ExMo4 Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

Aim To perform stress analysis for the given axi-symmetric component

Problem description

Creation of the solid model

Sketch module

Open a new part file rarrselect the top plane rarrselect normal viewrarr

draw the rectangular shape rarrselect smart dimensionsrarr modify the dimensions 1000mm x 15mm rarrok

Select sketch rarr draw centre axis rarr ok Feature Module

Select the sketch rarr select revolve rarr select the centre axisrarr revolution angle 90ordm

Surface Module

Select surface rarr mid surface rarrselect the two outer faces rarrok Right click the surface model rarr edit definition rarr enter thickness

15mm rarr ok

Analysis of the solid model

Simulation Module

New Study

To define a new study rarr select New Study rarrstatic rarrok Static Study

To select static study in the study tab Simulation automatically

creates a study folder with the following sub folders Static Study Connections Fixtures Loads Mesh and Report folder

Apply Materials

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 38: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

38

To apply material to the Simulation model rarr right-click the part folder in simulation study and select ApplyEdit Material rarr Alloy steel rarr

ok Apply Fixtures

To define the Fixturesrarr Right-click the Fixture folder in Static study

In Fixturesrarr select Advanced geometry rarr select symmetry rarr select the end faces (left amp right end face) where Fixture is to be applied rarr ok

Apply loads

Right-click the Force folder rarr Select Pressure rarr Select the inner surface of the sector rarrEnter pressure 15Mpa rarr ok Create the mesh

Right-click the Mesh folder rarr create mesh rarr select Automatic

transition rarrok Run the analysis

Select Run to start the solution

Results

The solution can be executed with different properties

stresses

displacements

strains

Result

The analysis of the axi-symmetric component was carried out using the solidworks simulation and the software results were compared

with analytical values

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 39: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

39

Ex No 5 Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

Ex No 6 Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever Simply Supported Fixed ends)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 40: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

40

Ex No 7 Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 8 Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

Ex No 9 Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

AIM

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 41: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

41

Ex No 10 Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 42: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

42

MATLAB INTRODUCTION Overview of the MATLABreg Environment

The MATLABreg high-performance language for technical computing

integrates computation visualization and programming in an easy-to-use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar

mathematical notation Typical uses include

bull Math and computation bull Algorithm development

bull Data acquisition bull Modeling simulation and prototyping

bull Data analysis exploration and visualization bull Scientific and engineering graphics

bull Application development Including graphical user interface building MATLAB is an interactive system whose basic data element is an array that does not require

dimensioning It allows you to solve many technical computing problems especially those with matrix and vector formulations in a fraction of the

time it would take to write a program in a scalar noninteractive language such as C or FORTRAN

The name MATLAB stands for matrix laboratory MATLAB was originally

written to provide easy access to matrix software developed by the LINPACK and EISPACK projects Today MATLAB engines incorporate

the LAPACK and BLAS libraries embedding the state of the art in software for matrix computation

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 43: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

43

SIMULINK INTRODUCTION Simulink is a graphical extension to MATLAB for modeling and

simulation of systems In Simulink systems are drawn on screen as block diagrams Many elements of block diagrams are available such as transfer

functions summing junctions etc as well as virtual input and output devices such as function generators and oscilloscopes Simulink is integrated

with MATLAB and data can be easily transferred between the programs In these tutorials we will apply Simulink to the examples from the MATLAB

tutorials to model the systems build controllers and simulate the systems Simulink is supported on Unix Macintosh and Windows environments and

is included in the student version of MATLAB for personal computers

The idea behind these tutorials is that you can view them in one window while running Simulink in another window System model files can be

downloaded from the tutorials and opened in Simulink You will modify and

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 44: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

44

extend these system while learning to use Simulink for system modeling control and simulation Do not confuse the windows icons and menus in

the tutorials for your actual Simulink windows Most images in these tutorials are not live - they simply display what you should see in your own

Simulink windows All Simulink operations should be done in your Simulink windows

1 Starting Simulink

2 Model Files 3 Basic Elements

4 Running Simulations 5 Building Systems

Starting Simulink

Simulink is started from the MATLAB command prompt by entering the following command

gtgt Simulink

Alternatively you can hit the Simulink button at the top of the MATLAB window as shown below

When it starts Simulink brings up the Simulink Library browser

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 45: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

45

Open the modeling window with New then Model from the File menu on the Simulink Library Browser as shown above

This will bring up a new untitiled modeling window shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 46: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

46

Model Files

In Simulink a model is a collection of blocks which in general represents a system In addition to drawing a model into a blank model window

previously saved model files can be loaded either from the File menu or from the MATLAB command prompt

You can open saved files in Simulink by entering the following command in

the MATLAB command window (Alternatively you can load a file using the Open option in the File menu in Simulink or by hitting Ctrl+O in

Simulink)

gtgt filename

The following is an example model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 47: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

47

A new model can be created by selecting New from the File menu in any Simulink window (or by hitting Ctrl+N)

Basic Elements

There are two major classes of items in Simulink blocks and lines Blocks are used to generate modify combine output and display signals Lines are

used to transfer signals from one block to another

Blocks

There are several general classes of blocks

Continuous

Discontinuous Discrete Look-Up Tables

Math Operations Model Verification

Model-Wide Utilities Ports amp Subsystems

Signal Attributes Signal Routing

Sinks Used to output or display signals Sources Used to generate various signals

User-Defined Functions Discrete Linear discrete-time system elements (transfer functions state-

space models etc) Linear Linear continuous-time system elements and connections (summing junctions gains etc)

Nonlinear Nonlinear operators (arbitrary functions saturation delay etc)

Connections Multiplex Demultiplex System Macros etc

Blocks have zero to several input terminals and zero to several output terminals Unused input terminals are indicated by a small open triangle

Unused output terminals are indicated by a small triangular point The block shown below has an unused input terminal on the left and an unused output

terminal on the right

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 48: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

48

Lines

Lines transmit signals in the direction indicated by the arrow Lines must always transmit signals from the output terminal of one block to the input

terminal of another block One exception to this is a line can tap off of another line splitting the signal to each of two destination blocks as shown

below

Lines can never inject a signal into another line lines must be combined

through the use of a block such as a summing junction

A signal can be either a scalar signal or a vector signal For Single-Input

Single-Output systems scalar signals are generally used For Multi-Input Multi-Output systems vector signals are often used consisting of two or more scalar signals The lines used to transmit scalar and vector signals are

identical The type of signal carried by a line is determined by the blocks on either end of the line

Simple Example

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 49: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

49

The simple model (from the model files section) consists of three blocks Step Transfer Fcn and Scope The Step is a source block from which a step

input signal originates This signal is transferred through the line in the direction indicated by the arrow to the Transfer Function linear block The

Transfer Function modifies its input signal and outputs a new signal on a line to the Scope The Scope is a sink block used to display a signal much like an oscilloscope

There are many more types of blocks available in Simulink some of which will be discussed later Right now we will examine just the three we have

used in the simple model

Modifying Blocks

A block can be modified by double-clicking on it For example if you double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the simple model you will see

the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 50: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

50

This dialog box contains fields for the numerator and the denominator of the blocks transfer function By entering a vector containing the coefficients of

the desired numerator or denominator polynomial the desired transfer function can be entered For example to change the denominator to

s^2+2s+1 enter the following into the denominator field

[1 2 1]

and hit the close button the model window will change to the following

which reflects the change in the denominator of the transfer function

The step block can also be double-clicked bringing up the following

dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 51: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

51

The default parameters in this dialog box generate a step function occurring at time=1 sec from an initial level of zero to a level of 1 (in other words a

unit step at t=1) Each of these parameters can be changed Close this dialog before continuing

The most complicated of these three blocks is the Scope block Double

clicking on this brings up a blank oscilloscope screen

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 52: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

52

When a simulation is performed the signal which feeds into the scope will be displayed in this window Detailed operation of the scope will not be

covered in this tutorial The only function we will use is the autoscale button which appears as a pair of binoculars in the upper portion of the

window

Running Simulations

To run a simulation we will work with the following model file

simple2mdl

Download and open this file in Simulink following the previous instructions

for this file You should see the following model window

Before running a simulation of this system first open the scope window by double-clicking on the scope block Then to start the simulation either

select Start from the Simulation menu (as shown below) or hit Ctrl-T in the model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 53: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

53

The simulation should run very quickly and the scope window will appear as shown below If it doesnt just double click on the block labeled scope

Note that the simulation output (shown in yellow) is at a very low level

relative to the axes of the scope To fix this hit the autoscale button (binoculars) which will rescale the axes as shown below

Note that the step response does not begin until t=1 This can be changed by double-clicking on the step block Now we will change the parameters of

the system and simulate the system again Double-click on the Transfer Fcn block in the model window and change the denominator to

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 54: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

54

[1 20 400]

Re-run the simulation (hit Ctrl-T) and you should see what appears as a flat line in the scope window Hit the autoscale button and you should see the

following in the scope window

Notice that the autoscale button only changes the vertical axis Since the new

transfer function has a very fast response it compressed into a very narrow part of the scope window This is not really a problem with the scope but

with the simulation itself Simulink simulated the system for a full ten seconds even though the system had reached steady state shortly after one

second

To correct this you need to change the parameters of the simulation itself In the model window select Parameters from the Simulation menu You will

see the following dialog box

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 55: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

55

There are many simulation parameter options we will only be concerned with the start and stop times which tell Simulink over what time period to

perform the simulation Change Start time from 00 to 08 (since the step doesnt occur until t=10 Change Stop time from 100 to 20 which should

be only shortly after the system settles Close the dialog box and rerun the simulation After hitting the autoscale button the scope window should provide a much better display of the step response as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 56: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

56

Building Systems

In this section you will learn how to build systems in Simulink using the

building blocks in Simulinks Block Libraries You will build the following system

First you will gather all the necessary blocks from the block libraries Then you will modify the blocks so they correspond to the blocks in the desired

model Finally you will connect the blocks with lines to form the complete system After this you will simulate the complete system to verify that it

works

Gathering Blocks

Follow the steps below to collect the necessary blocks

Create a new model (New from the File menu or Ctrl-N) You will get a

blank model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 57: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

57

Click on the Library Browser button to open the Simulink Library Browser Click on the Sources option under the expanded Simulink title to reveal possible sources for the model

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 58: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

58

Drag the Step block from the sources window into the left side of your model window

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 59: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

59

From the Simulink Library Browser drag the Sum and Gain from Math Operations option found under the Simulink title

Switch to the Continuous option and drag two instances of the Transfer Fcn (drag it two times) into your model window arranged approximately as

shown below The exact alignment is not important since it can be changed

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 60: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

60

later Just try to get the correct relative positions Notice that the second Transfer Function block has a 1 after its name Since no two blocks may

have the same name Simulink automatically appends numbers following the names of blocks to differentiate between them

Click on the Sinks option then drag over the Scope icon

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 61: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

61

Modify Blocks

Follow these steps to properly modify the blocks in your model

Double-click your Sum block Since you will want the second input to be subtracted enter +- into the list of signs field Close the dialog box

Double-click your Gain block Change the gain to 25 and close the dialog box

Double-click the leftmost Transfer Function block Change the numerator to [1 2] and the denominator to [1 0] Close the dialog box

Double-click the rightmost Transfer Function block Leave the numerator [1] but change the denominator to [1 2 4] Close the dialog box Your model

should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 62: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

62

Change the name of the first Transfer Function block by clicking on the words Transfer Fcn A box and an editing cursor will appear on the blocks

name as shown below Use the keyboard (the mouse is also useful) to delete the existing name and type in the new name PI Controller Click

anywhere outside the name box to finish editing

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 63: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

63

Similarly change the name of the second Transfer Function block from Transfer Fcn1 to Plant Now all the blocks are entered properly Your

model should appear as

Connecting Blocks with Lines

Now that the blocks are properly laid out you will now connect them together Follow these steps

Drag the mouse from the output terminal of the Step block to the upper

(positive) input of the Sum block Let go of the mouse button only when the mouse is right on the input terminal Do not worry about the path you follow

while dragging the line will route itself You should see the following

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 64: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

64

The resulting line should have a filled arrowhead If the arrowhead is open as shown below it means it is not connected to anything

You can continue the partial line you just drew by treating the open arrowhead as an output terminal and drawing just as before Alternatively if

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 65: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

65

you want to redraw the line or if the line connected to the wrong terminal you should delete the line and redraw it To delete a line (or any other

object) simply click on it to select it and hit the delete key

Draw a line connecting the Sum block output to the Gain input Also

draw a line from the Gain to the PI Controller a line from the PI Controller to the Plant and a line from the Plant to the Scope You should now have the following

The line remaining to be drawn is the feedback signal connecting the

output of the Plant to the negative input of the Sum block This line is different in two ways First since this line loops around and does not simply

follow the shortest (right-angled) route so it needs to be drawn in several stages Second there is no output terminal to start from so the line has to tap

off of an existing line

To tap off the output line hold the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse from the point on the existing line where you want to tap off In this case start

just to the right of the Plant Drag until you get to the lower left corner of the desired feedback signal line as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 66: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

66

Now the open arrowhead of this partial line can be treated as an output terminal Draw a line from it to the negative terminal of the Sum block in the

usual manner

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 67: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

67

Now you will align the blocks with each other for a neater appearance Once connected the actual positions of the blocks does not matter but it is

easier to read if they are aligned To move each block drag it with the mouse The lines will stay connected and re-route themselves The middles

and corners of lines can also be dragged to different locations Starting at the left drag each block so that the lines connecting them are purely horizontal

Also adjust the spacing between blocks to leave room for signal labels You should have something like

Finally you will place labels in your model to identify the signals To

place a label anywhere in your model double click at the point you want the label to be Start by double clicking above the line leading from the Step block You will get a blank text box with an editing cursor as shown below

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 68: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

68

Type an r in this box labeling the reference signal and click outside it to end editing

Label the error (e) signal the control (u) signal and the output (y) signal

in the same manner Your final model should appear as

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 69: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

69

To save your model select Save As in the File menu and type in any desired model name

Simulation

Now that the model is complete you can simulate the model Select Start from the Simulation menu to run the simulation Double-click on the Scope

block to view its output Hit the autoscale button (binoculars) and you should see the following

Taking Variables from MATLAB

In some cases parameters such as gain may be calculated in MATLAB to

be used in a Simulink model If this is the case it is not necessary to enter the result of the MATLAB calculation directly into Simulink For example suppose we calculated the gain in MATLAB in the variable K Emulate this

by entering the following command at the MATLAB command prompt

K=25

This variable can now be used in the Simulink Gain block In your Simulink model double-click on the Gain block and enter the following in the Gain

field

K

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 70: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

70

Close this dialog box Notice now that the Gain block in the Simulink model shows the variable K rather than a number

Now you can re-run the simulation and view the output on the Scope The result should be the same as before

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 71: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

71

Now if any calculations are done in MATLAB to change any of the variables used in the Simulink model the simulation will use the new values

the next time it is run To try this in MATLAB change the gain K by entering the following at the command prompt

K=5

Start the Simulink simulation again bring up the Scope window and hit the autoscale button You will see the following output which reflects the new higher gain

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 72: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

72

Besides variables signals and even entire systems can be exchanged between MATLAB and Simulink

Simulation using MAT LAB

ExNo 15 Simulation of Spring ndash Mass System

Writing Matlab Functions Damped spring system

In this example we will create a Simulink model for a mass attached to a spring with a linear damping force

A mass on a spring with a velocity-dependant damping force and a time-dependant force acting upon it will behave according to the following

equation

The model will be formed around this equation In this equation m is the

equivalent mass of the system c is the damping constant and k is the constant for the stiffness of the spring First we want to rearrange the above

equation so that it is in terms of acceleration then we will integrate to get the expressions for velocity and position Rearranging the equation to

accomplish this we get

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 73: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

73

To build the model we start with a step block and a gain block The gain block represents the mass which we will be equal to 5 We also know that

we will need to integrate twice that we will need to add these equations together and that there are two more constants to consider The damping

constant c will act on the velocity that is after the first integration and the constant k will act on the position or after the second integration Let c = 035 and let k = 05 Laying all these block out to get an idea of how to put

them together we get

By looking at the equation in terms of acceleration it is clear that the

damping term and spring term are summed negatively while the mass term is still positive To add places and change signs of terms being summed

double-click on the sum function block and edit the list of signs

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 74: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

74

Once we have added places and corrected the signs for the sum block we need only connect the lines to their appropriate places To be able to see

what is happening with this spring system we add a scope block and add it as follows

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 75: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

75

The values of m c and k can be altered to test cases of under-damping

critical-damping and over-damping To accurately use the scope right-click the graph and select Autoscale

The mdl-file can now be saved The following is a sample output when the

model is run for 30 iterations

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 76: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

76

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 77: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

77

ExNO16 Simulation of Air-conditioning of a house

Air Conditioning of a House Simulation of Room Heater This illustrates how we can use Simulink to create the Air

Conditioning of a house - Room Heater This system depends on the outdoor environment the thermal characteristics of the house and the house heating system The air_condition1m file initializes data in the model

workspace To make changes we can edit the model workspace directly or edit the m-file and re-load the model workspace

Opening the Model In the MATLAB window load the model by executing the following

code (select the code and press F9 to evaluate selection) mdl=rsquoair_condition01rsquo

open_system(mdl) The House Heating Model

Model Initialization When the model is opened it loads the information about the house

from the air_condition1m file The M-file does the following Defines the house geometry (size number of windows) Specifies the thermal properties of house materials

Calculates the thermal resistance of the house Provides the heater characteristics (temperature of the hot air flow-

rate) Defines the cost of electricity (Rs400kWhr)

Specifies the initial room temperature (10 deg Celsius = 50 deg Fahrenheit)

Note Time is given in units of hours Certain quantities like air flow-rate are expressed per hour (not per second)

Model Components Set Point

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 78: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

78

Set Point is a constant block It specifies the temperature that must be maintained indoors It is set at 86 degrees Fahrenheit which is equal to 30

degrees Centigrade By default Temperatures are given in Fahrenheit but then are

converted to Celsius to perform the calculations

Thermostat Thermostat is a subsystem that contains a Relay block The

thermostat allows fluctuations of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above or below the desired room temperature If air temperature drops below 81 degrees

Fahrenheit the thermostat turns on the heater We can see the Thermostat subsystem by the following command in

MATLAB Command window open_system([mdlThermostat])

Heater Heater is a subsystem that has a constant air flow rate Mdot

which is specified in the air_conditionm M-file The thermostat signal turns the heater on or off When the heater is on it blows hot air at temperature

THeater (50 degrees Celsius = 122 degrees Fahrenheit by default) at a

constant flow rate of Mdot (1kgsec = 3600kghr by default) The heat flow into the room is expressed by the Equation 1

Equation 1 (dQdt) = (T heater ndash Troom)Mdotc where c is the heat capacity of air at constant pressure

We can see the Heater subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHeater]) Cost Calculator Cost Calculator is a Gain block Cost Calculator integrates the heat

flow over time and multiplies it by the energy cost The cost of heating is plotted in the PlotResults scope

House House is a subsystem that calculates room temperature variations It

takes into consideration the heat flow from the heater and heat losses to the environment Heat losses and the temperature time derivative are expressed

by Equation 2 Equation 2

(dQdt)losses =(Troom ndash Tout) Req where Req is the equivalent thermal resistance of the house

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 79: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

79

We can see the House subsystem by the following command in MATLAB Command window

open_system([mdlHouse]) Modeling the Environment

We model the environment as a heat sink with infinite heat capacity and time varying temperature Tout The constant block Avg Outdoor

Temp specifies the average air temperature outdoors The Daily Temp Variation Sine Wave block generates daily temperature fluctuations of

outdoor temperature We can vary these parameters and see how they affect the heating costs

Running the Simulation and Visualizing the Results We can run the simulation and visualize the results

Open the PlotResults scope to visualize the results The heat cost and indoor versus outdoor temperatures are plotted on the scope The

temperature outdoor varies sinusoidally whereas the indoors temperature is maintained within 5 degrees Fahrenheit of Set Point Time axis is labeled in hours

evalc(sim(mdl)) open_system([mdl PlotResults])

Remarks

This particular model is designed to calculate the heating costs only If the temperature of the outside air is higher than the room temperature the

room temperature will exceed the desired Set Pointrdquo

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 80: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

80

ExNO 17 CAM and FOLLOWER SYSTEM

A cam and follower system is systemmechanism that uses a cam and follower to create a specific motion The cam is in most cases merely a flat

piece of metal that has had an unusual shape or profile machined onto it This cam is attached to a shaft which enables it to be turned by applying a turning action to the shaft As the cam rotates it is the profile or shape of the

cam that causes the follower to move in a particular way The movement of the follower is then transmitted to another mechanism or another part of the

mechanism

Examining the diagram shown above we can see that as some external turning force is applied to the shaft (for example by motor or by hand) the

cam rotates with it The follower is free to move in the Y plane but is unable to move in the other two so as the lobe of the cam passes the edge of the

follower it causes the follower to move up Then some external downward force (usually a spring and gravity) pushes the follower down making it keep

contact with the cam This external force is needed to keep the follower in contact with the cam profile

Displacement Diagrams

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 81: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

81

Displacement diagrams are merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two dispalcements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and 2 the angular displacement (distance) rotated by the cam

In the diagram shown opposite we can see the two different displacements

represented by the two different arrows The green arrow representing the

displacement of the follower ie the distance travelled up or down by the

follower The mustard arrow (curved arrow) shows the angular displacement

travelled by the cam

Note Angular displacement is the angle through which the cam has rotated

If we examine the diagram shown below we can see the relationship between a displacement diagram and the actual profile of the cam Note

only half of the displacement diagram is drawn because the second half of the diagram is the same as the first The diagram is correct from a

theoretical point of view but would have to changed slightly if the cam was to be actually made and used We will consider this a little more in the the

following section - Uniform Velocity

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 82: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

82

Uniform Velocity

Uniform Velocity means travelling at a constant speed in a fixed direction

and as long as the speed or direction dont change then its uniform velocity In relation to cam and follower systems uniform velocity refers to the

motion of the follower

Now lets consider a typical displacement diagram which is merely a plot of two different displacements (distances) These two displacements are

1 the distance travelled up or down by the follower and

2 the angular displacement (distance) of the cam

Let us consider the case of a cam imparting a uniform velocity on a follower over a displacement of 30mm for the first half of its cycle

We shall take the cycle in steps Firstly if the cam has to impart a displacement of 30mm on follower over half its cycle then it must impart a

displacement of 30mmdivide180ordm for every 1ordm turned by the cam ie it must move the follower 0167mm per degree turn This distance is to much to small to draw on a displacement diagram so we will consider the displacement of the

follower at the start at the end of the half cycle the end of the full cycle and at certain other intervals (these intervals or the

length of these intervals will be decided on later)

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 83: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

83

Angle the cam has rotated through

Distance moved by the follower

Start of the Cycle 0ordm 0mm

End of first Half of the

Cycle 180ordm 30mm

End of the Full Cycle 360ordm 0mm

We shall consider this in terms of a displacement diagram

First we will plot the graph Before doing this we must first consider the increments that we will use We will use millimeters for the fo llower

displacement increments and because 1ordm is too small we will use increments of 30ordm for the angular displacement

Once this is done then we can draw the displacement diagram as shown

below Note a straight line from the displacement of the follower at the start of the motion to the displacement of the follower at the end of the motion

represents uniform velocity

Displacement Diagram for Uniform Velocity

Simple Harmonic Motion

For this type of motion the follower displacement does not change at a constant rate In other words the follower doesnt travel at constant speed The best way to understand this non-uniform motion is to imagine a simple

pendulum swinging

Uniform Acceleration and Retardation

This motion is used where the follower is required to rise or fall with

uniform acceleration that is its velocity is changing at a constant rate

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 84: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

84

To conclude this

A cam can impart three types of motion on its follower

Uniform velocity Simple harmonic motion Uniform acceleration and

retardation

Each of these motions can be represented by a displacement diagram

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 85: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

85

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 86: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

86

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 87: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

87

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 88: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

88

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 89: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

89

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 90: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

90

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 91: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

91

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 92: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

92

Simply supported beam

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 93: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

93

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 94: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

94

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 95: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

95

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 96: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

96

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 97: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

97

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98

Page 98: Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Lab Manual_7

ME1404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB REC

98